Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 . Finally. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

electrical panels. such as duct. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. fixtures. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Germany. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. such as mechanical equipment. electrical. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. and plumbing fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and piping. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. 3 . You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Add basic MEP elements. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial.

and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. For example. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. You do not design entire systems. to provide a richer and more finished design. you can choose to save your work. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. NOTE Depending on your installation. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. templates. Metric file names have an _m suffix. and sheets to document the project. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. annotations. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. such as templates and families. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. however. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Metric: files for users working with metric units. On the Contents tab. when you add ductwork. So. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. you learn where the training files are located. as well as how to open and save them. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. views. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. After completing each exercise. For example. Create schedules. When you open a training file. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. However. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. your Training folder may be in a different location. and tags. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. In this exercise. is located and accessed in the training files location. When you install the training files as instructed. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Create detail views.

a list of file types displays. you are prompted to save the changes. and click the Training Files icon. double-click Imperial or Metric. and you can open any supported file type. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. verify that Project Files (*. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. You may close the file with or without saving changes.rvt and make changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. scroll down. 4 Click the training file name. and click Save. the Open dialog displays. Accessing Training Files | 5 . For Files of type. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. 8 If you have made changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name.rvt. For File name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. and click Open. 3 In the right pane. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click ➤ Save As. For example. if you open settings.rvt) is selected. enter the new file name.

6 .

The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. scope. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In this case. the hierarchy of elements. the operation of the software is parametric. the parameter is one of association or connection. and plans. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. quantities. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. hence. schedules. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. drawings. If the length of the elevation is changed. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. every drawing sheet. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. sections. In the Revit MEP model. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the floor or roof remains connected. drawing sheets. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. In this case. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and schedules required for a building project. and phases when you need it. the door retains this relationship to the partition. If you move the partition. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. 2D and 3D view. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. You learn the terminology. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. ■ ■ 7 .

■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Examples include detail lines. tags. They display in relevant views of the design. filled regions. sprinklers.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. and electrical panels. They help to describe or document the design. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. boilers. sprinklers. and keynotes are annotation elements. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. grids. boilers. tags. ducts. For example. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. sinks. and reference planes are datum elements. and 2D detail components. When you change something. For example. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ducts. dimensions. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Datum elements help to define project context. levels. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. walls and ceilings are hosts. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. sinks. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and electrical panels. For example. dimensions.

you do nothing to establish these relationships. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. section views. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. and so forth). Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Often. In other cases. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . floors. Project: In Revit MEP. first floor. or bottom of foundation. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. from geometry to construction data. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. For example. views of the project. elevation views. By using a single project file. top of wall. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. To place levels. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. you must be in a section or elevation view. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. and ceilings. families. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you can explicitly control them. programming is not required. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. schedules. However. for example. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Most often. In Revit MEP. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. and drawings of the design. The project file contains all information for the building design. North . and types. If you can draw. such as roofs. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. This information includes components used to design the model.

you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. System families include ducts. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . identical use. Then experiment with them. and wires. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. A type can be a specific size of a family. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. However. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. and similar graphical representation. Type: Each family can have several types. pipes. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. or layer the views to see only the one on top. For example. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. hiding. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. A type can also be a style. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. With a few clicks. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Unlike system and standard component families. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. System families can be transferred between projects. each in-place family contains only a single type. For example. For example. You can also display several project views at one time. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. showing. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system.

2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To return the panel to the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides.

many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. and for switching views. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for running analysis on the current design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. When working on the Modify tab. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. select the tool first. architect-specific tools. then select what you want to modify. and settings. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. project and system parameters. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for managing and modifying the current view.. and CAD files.. data and systems.

displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. To keep a panel expanded. closes the application menu (double-click). A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays frequently used tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. when adding duct. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. provides requested information. By default. provides access to common tools. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). For example. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.

Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. (Save As) export the current drawing. click. select a file to open. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Open) save the current drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. such as Export and Publish.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to... select a template and create a new drawing.. (Export) On the application menu.

annotation. annotation. to. To enable or disable a tool item. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Print) access product and license information. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.. (Publish) print the current drawing. publish the current project. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. family. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server...On the application menu. (Licensing) close the file. Camera.. saves a current project. or template file. provides views including Default 3D. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. and Walkthrough. click. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. but is not enabled by default. family. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 .

displaying the same information. In addition. When you are highlighting an element or component. Clipboard. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Starting with the most recent command. To show the Status Bar again. However. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Modify. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. check the Status Bar. This displays the command history in a list. repeat the command. Group. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. When you are using a command. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode.To undo or redo a series of operations. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. when you switch to another editing mode. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. or the Family Editor. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Clear the Status Bar check mark. workshared components. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. To hide the Status Bar. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next.

Place a Wall. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. for example. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. click (Modify). To change existing elements to a different type. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. select one or more elements of the same category.To cancel or exit the current command. When you place an element in a drawing. On the Quick Access toolbar. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon.

Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. In the following steps. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 1 Click ➤ Open. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. After you are familiar with these tasks. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. For example. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. click Training Files.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. There are several ways to access zoom options.

you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE As you zoom in and out. In the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 9 To display SteeringWheels. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. on the Navigation bar. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. click . Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 6 Click in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. When you release the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify.

12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and then using the Zoom tool again. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Click and drag to orbit the design. ➤ Options. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click the SteeringWheels tab. press ESC.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. As you move the mouse. moving the wheel to the desired location. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and click tin the Options dialog. 14 To exit the wheel. For more information about SteeringWheels.

display along the ends. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Similar controls. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. referred to as shape handles.HVAC Plan .Design. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and open Level 2 . bottoms.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. These are the drag controls. called drag controls. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Enter ZR. After you are familiar with these tasks. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. as shown. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Small blue dots. and select the duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.3 Click and drag the bottom control. or press CTRL+Z. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. on the Standard toolbar. 6 On the Undo menu. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the Undo command. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. select the first item in the list. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. In this example. Move.

Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. click to specify the starting position. and click again to specify the ending position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. After selecting the element to move. The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. for example. In this case. as shown. Some commands. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . such as Move and Copy. and drag it to the left as shown. 11 With the duct already selected. 10 Move the cursor to the right. you want to move the duct.

stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 14 Enter VG. 13 To end a command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. For example. Click OK. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Select Mechanical . such as the Modify Ducts command. Press ESC twice.Return. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.Supply.End a command Some commands.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. Finally. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. settings. You can choose from several templates. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. and modify system settings. and geometry from the starting template. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. under Create new. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. click Browse. 5 In the New Project dialog. such as the default project units and settings. You can either select a template from the template library. select Project.rte template. use copy/monitor. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. the default building levels and standard views. 27 . link files. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. New projects inherit all the families. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 2 In the New Project dialog. such as ducts and pipes. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 6 Click OK. you learn how to start a project from a template. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and click Open. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. under Template file. In that case. system families. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. and loadable families. click Training files. create and manage views. such as coordination review and interference checking.

15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. NH. Click Cancel. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. select School or University. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. select Level 1. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. under Energy Analysis. select Project template. click Edit. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. for City. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. review the construction materials listed. select Manchester. In the Choose Template dialog.7 In the Project Browser. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Click OK twice. Click OK. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab.rte template and click Open. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). When you select the material. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. and open North. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Location. 10 Using the same method. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. If you want to use a template other than the default. (Browse). 8 In the drawing area. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. for Energy Data. click (Browse). ■ ■ Under Create new. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. navigate to Imperial Templates. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. you can select it now. ■ For Building Construction. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. create another new project using the Construction template. click Browse. For example. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools.

Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. under Pipe Settings. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. and 5 1/2". and 12 1/2". For Categories. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. wiring. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 5 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings. 23 In the left pane. 22 In the right pane. 24 In the right pane. 10 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. plumbing. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 4 1/2". 26 In the right pane. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.rfa and click Open. 25 In the left pane. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. and fire protection systems.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 27 Click OK.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. Holding CTRL. for 3 1/2". they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Views. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for 3/4". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . for 3 1/2". click Rectangular. click Wiring. power distribution systems. and demand factors for electrical systems. click Sizes. 11 1/2". 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. select Identity Data. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 33 Click OK. Click OK twice. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. click Round. piping. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 4 1/2". under Duct Settings. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected.

37 Save this file to a location on your local system.Origin to Origin. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. families. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. under Create new. In addition. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 5 Click OK. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. From the Positioning list. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Sub-Discipline. To enable this coordination. under Template file. Linking Projects In this exercise. For Then by. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 38 Close the file. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. select Family and Type. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select View Name. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Associated Level. and groups that are contained in a project. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Click Open. select Auto . sheets. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. click Training. select Project. click Browse. Notice that the file is saved as a template.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. For Then by. For Sort by.rvt. You need to create the MEP model for the project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 4 In the New Project dialog.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click (Browse). 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. click the My Library icon. and click Open. templates. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ➤ Open. click (Add Value). 15 Under Library Name. or families. and click OK twice.11 In the Places dialog. and select it as the library path. and Import dialogs. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Load. Save. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and change the name to My Library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click My Library.

and decal image files. such as bump maps. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. If you want to relocate this path.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 Click in the drawing area. 19 Click Cancel. 2 In the Options dialog. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. click the Spelling tab. click Edit. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 9 In the text editor. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 11 In the Options dialog. 20 Click ➤ Options. select Ignore words in uppercase. 27 Click OK. 5 In the text editor. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. view the current path. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. This path is determined during installation. click OK. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 22 Select My Library. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 21 On the File Locations tab. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 3 Under Settings. click Places. If you work in a large office. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. specify the new location here. custom color files. click Edit. enter sheetmtl-Cu.

23 In the text editor. 19 In the Options dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click OK. click the Spelling tab. As you zoom in and out within a view. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click OK. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Template file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . click Training Files. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. under Dimension Snaps. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 6 In the Snaps dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click Browse. click Edit. In this exercise. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. you modify snap increments. 22 In the text editor. 20 Under Settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Restore Defaults. 24 In the Options dialog. you modify snap settings. work with snapping turned off. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Close.rte. You can turn snap settings on and off. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. and enter 1 . delete sheetmtl-CU. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.17 In the Spelling dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options. 25 Close the file without saving it. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click File menu ➤ Save.

and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action.7 Under Object Snaps. 8 In the Snaps dialog. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . For example. such as ZO to zoom out. 10 On the Options Bar. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. While sketching. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. deselect Chain. This is the increment that you added previously. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. If it does not. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If you do not have a wheel button. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. TIP To zoom while sketching. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. enter SM. zoom out until it does so. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. and move the cursor to the right. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. use the wheel button on your mouse. click OK. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’.

21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and delete the value 1’ . with or without saving it. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. it will snap to the endpoints. and move the cursor to the right. 25 Click OK. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. If you move the cursor along the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Notice that snapping is once again active. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. the midpoint. 19 Enter SM.. 22 Move the cursor downward. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. and the wall edges. and specify the wall endpoint. 26 Close the file.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 .

44 .

you first configure the linked architectural model. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. As you create the mechanical system. This system consists of a cooling tower. and then you create a plenum level. you first plan the system. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In this exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. By following the recommended workflow. you will understand the process. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. 45 . duct system and a hydronic piping system. In this lesson. go to http://www. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.autodesk. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. water source heat pump (WSHP). You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. After finishing each exercise. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. However. you can choose to save your work. methodology. you design a mechanical system for an office building. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. At the end of the tutorial. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and click OK. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In this section. not in the MEP training file. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. NOTE When working with a linked file. 1 In the Project Browser. click to select it. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ceilings.rvt. under Constraints. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. Next. indicating that it’s the active view. and after the linked model highlights. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. click Training Files. roof. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. you add a level for plenums.Space Plan is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . These components are defined in the architectural training file. select Room Bounding. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume.

MEP. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Press Esc. and double-click West . 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 8'. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Click Plan View Types. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and enter Level 2 Plenum. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and click OK.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). For Offset. The new level is placed. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). verify that only Floor Plan is selected. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and in the Plan View Types dialog. 9 On the Draw panel. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level).6 In the Project Browser. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. Preparing Spaces | 47 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP .

NOTE After finishing each exercise. For Cut plane. for View Scale. you can choose to save your work. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you place spaces in areas of the building model. select Plenum Plan. Under Extents. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. enter an Offset of 1' 0". In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. select MEP . In this exercise. select Level Above (Level 3). select Design. However. click Edit. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. 20 In the Project Browser. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. and click Properties. for Top. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Notice that the site plan displays in the view.Plenum. ■ Click OK twice. right-click Level 2 Plenum. enter 0. Under Identity Data. Under View Depth. In the next exercise. for View Range. for Level. for Default View Template. and for Offset. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. For Sub-Discipline. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For View Classification. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. and then place spaces in various types of areas.

Placing Spaces | 49 . For Upper Limit. select Level 2 Plenum. For Offset. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. select Horizontal. walls. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. select New.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For (Tag Location). 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. and ceilings). 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. enter 0. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. indicating that it’s the active view. For Space.

Click OK. enter Library. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .7 Click to place the space. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 14 In the drawing area. enter 219.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ensuring coordination between the files. 9 Select the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Name.

Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click Modify. enter 0. For Upper Limit. select Level 3. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 21 Using the method learned previously. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing Spaces | 51 . For Offset.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. and then split the space using a space separation line. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.

4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. and then press Esc. for Upper Limit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. select Level 3. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. enter 0.

12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. the plan view would have updated with the changes. and press Enter. 11 Close the schedule view. enter Corridor. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. double-click the space name. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. In the schedule. 10 Using the same method.7 In the Project Browser. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 In the floor plan. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. and scroll to the newly placed space. as shown. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . change the space number to 216A. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. which was numbered 219Q.

17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.15 Press Esc twice. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. place a space in the lower area of the split space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 16 Using the method learned previously.

2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. click Training Files. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. If necessary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. you place a space in a chase. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.

right-click. select Interior and Reference. 10 In the plan view. click in the chase area to place the space. On the Options Bar. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. expand Spaces.4 Press Esc. enter 4'. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 6 Enter VG. for Name. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Under Identity Data. enter 0. For Number. enter Chase. In the plan view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. select the space. select Level 3. and click Element Properties. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 12 Click in the section view. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. For Limit Offset. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. select Roof Level. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. and then click OK. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. For Offset. enter 225PC.

under Loaded Tags. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 15 Press Esc. 17 Type ZF. All spaces in the view are tagged.Space Plan. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. select Space Tag With Volume. floors. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the next exercises. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ceilings. and maximize the view.Bounding elements (such as walls. and click OK. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area.

After a space is placed in an area. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. under Spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click View ➤ Zones. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create.rvt. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . To display space reference lines. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. which removes the space from the Default zone. 1 In the Project Browser.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Reference. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ).Zoning is highlighted.

select Occupiable. The graphic in the System Browser updates. the Edit Zone tab displays. you assign spaces to zones in the building. As you do this. 4 In the drawing area. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . indicating that the space is occupiable. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To display space reference lines.rvt. select Computer Lab 222. and modify the zone properties. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. you can add or remove a space from the zone. under Spaces. you assign spaces to a zone. Instruction 221. Using the Edit Zone tab. The Zone tool is active. and verify the zones in the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click 121 Cafeteria. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise.5 In the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Finish Editing Zone. Next.Zoning is highlighted. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. click Reference. and Electrical 220 spaces. and a new zone is created. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Energy Analysis.

Click OK. select HVAC Zones. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Expand HVAC Zones. Instruction. To view the zone in the drawing area. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill).In the System Browser. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). 5 With the drawing area active. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. type VG. you need to activate the zone visibility. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .

9 In the System Browser. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Zoning. To display space reference lines. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name.Area B. enter 2 . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . You activated zone visibility in the views. click Reference. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). and click OK. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.West .West . 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.TIP After you finish editing the zone. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. and verify the zone in the System Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. under Spaces. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. In this exercise. click Training Files. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. under Identity Data. expand 2 . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 11 Close the System Browser. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Finish Editing Zone.

Zoning view to activate it. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . Verify that the distance is 1/2".5 Click in the Level 1 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.Zoning view. zoom out. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Select Attached End. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning floor plan. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 8 In the Level 1 . 9 With the Add Space tool active.Zoning view. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. click in the Level 2 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 15 Press Esc. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

click the corner where the Top. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and zone information. space. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click OK. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. double-click Level 1 . 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.Zoning view. double-click the zone tag. for Name Value. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. on the ViewCube.Zoning to make it the active view.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. In this exercise. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .East. enter Lounge . you verify the building. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Front.

The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Next. you isolate the space.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Click (Highlight). verify that Wireframe is selected. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. and select 109 Lounge. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. With 109 Lounge selected. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. click (Isolate). The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Using the Highlight tool.

select 1_South_Lounge. ■ ■ ■ Next. For Electrical Loads. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). All spaces in the zone display in isolation. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. select Lounge/Recreation. click . and then click OK. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. verify that <Building> is selected. and click OK. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and in the People dialog. click . Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. the space information displays for the selected space. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. select 109 Lounge. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. scroll down in the left pane. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. For Construction Type. click . Below the list of spaces and zones. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. For People. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values.■ On the Details tab. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Next. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then click OK.

■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and dehumidification set point. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. floors. verify that 70. and humidification set point. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. Next. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. outdoor air per area. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. For Cooling Information.00 °F : 90.00 °F : N/A is specified.00 °F : N/A is specified.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. This indicates the cooling set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. Below the list of spaces and zones. For Heating Information. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. This indicates the outdoor air per person. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that 74. roofs. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and air changes per hour. cooling air temperature.00 °F : 54. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and other room-bounding components. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . heating air temperature. click (Shading). This indicates the heating set point.

15 In the Project Browser. Under Energy Analysis. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. For Name. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). select Plenum. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. click Cancel. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. enter 0. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 212P. select Level 3. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Because this is an unoccupied space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. select Plenum. Click OK. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open MEP . Under Energy Analysis. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. For Offset.

verify that Manchester. select School or University.rvt. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. NH. for Energy Data. under Energy Analysis. On the Place tab. and zone information. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click Edit.Space Plan. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that the space has replaced the void. space. click Training Files. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. and select space Plenum 212P. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Postal Code. enter 03101. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. click in the Value field. For Location. double-click Level 2 . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. you verified building. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. In this exercise. for City. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. is selected. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. If. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. verify that 1' 0" is specified. select Heated and cooled. right-click. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For People. and click OK.Audio Visual. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that New Construction is selected. and click Element Properties. For Project Phase. both. click Edit. enter 150 Btu/h. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Building Construction. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. ■ On the Weather tab. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. a cooling load. In order to select a space. For Sensible. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . or neither. and click OK. Click OK twice. click in the Value column. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. select Library . 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. under Volume Computations. 8 In the drawing area. and enter 50 sq. For Export Complexity. ft. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). Under Heat Gain (per Person). this option adjusts the times automatically. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. you need to select this option. and click OK. enter 200 Btu/h. select space Library 219. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Specified. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For Latent. for Building Service. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Ground Plane. for Values. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. For Space Type. and then click . verify that <Building> is specified.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. for Values. Select Area per person. select Specified. For Condition Type. verify that Level 1 is selected.

verify that Manchester. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . For Building Construction. Click OK twice. There should be no warnings displayed. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. For Electrical Loads. verify that School or University is selected. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Next. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. for Values. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. is specified. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. You have verified the building information. You should correct the space error in the building model. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. For Location. and click to learn the cause for the warning. For Building Service. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. select Actual. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. and under Heating Information. and can be modified here. 12 Click the Details tab. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. click Edit. select 219 Library. and click OK.■ ■ ■ Click OK. Under Power. select Actual. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that <Building> is specified. Select the space associated with the warning. NH. click Information). Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Values. click Calculate. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F .

72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . or zone information. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Zones. and a loads report displays. click to the right of the building to place the legend. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. In this exercise. 17 In the loads report. 3 In the drawing area. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. space.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 After you review the loads report.Space Plan. select 219 Library. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .rvt. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. under Energy Analysis. 21 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. or make any changes to the model. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. and zone information for the building model. For Color Scheme. 19 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. weather. 15 Review the loads report for project. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. space. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view.

You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. in 1-ton increments. under Schemes.5 Zoom in to the legend. and click OK. select Tonnage Range. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select the color scheme legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view.

open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Using the method learned previously.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.

you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. enter Space Airflow Schedule. more category options are available. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Select Schedule building components. Click OK. If you select Show categories from all disciplines.12 Close the file with or without saving it. For Name. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Phase. for Select available fields from. select New Construction. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In this exercise. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.Space Fill is the active view. select Spaces. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Spaces. In the next exercise.rvt. click Training Files. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog.

double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. Select Ascending. select Level.■ Under Available fields. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Calculated Supply Airflow. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Header. In the Calculated Value dialog. and then click . select Air Flow. For Discipline. For Formula. Click OK. For Fields. for Formula.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. enter . You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Level. Select Formula. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. and then click Conditional Format. select Not Between. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select Airflow Delta. and Blank line. select Number. For Then by. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. and click OK. For Type. and then select Hidden field. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Fields dialog. enter Airflow Delta. click (Browse). ■ Click Calculated Value. select HVAC.

For Background Color. In the Color dialog. Under Conditions to Use. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. a view opens that contains the selected space. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . select red. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. ■ The schedule displays. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In the next lesson. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. click the color swatch. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. and click OK. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Click OK twice. right-click to access schedule properties. In later exercises. In this exercise. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. verify that Show is highlighted.■ ■ ■ For Value.

78 .

You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). As you place the air terminals. After completing the air systems lesson. and work with the airflow schedule. 79 . you modify air terminal parameters. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you will create supply air systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. Then. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. In this lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. After system creation.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. the space crossing lines display.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.rvt. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 3 In the ceiling view. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and scroll to space 223. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

15 On the Options Bar. Also.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and then press Esc to end the command. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. the hosted elements are updated as well. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 17 Move the cursor down. click Place on Face.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and press Enter. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. select the diffuser. and press Enter. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. If the host element is modified or moved. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 9 On the Placement panel. type 12. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and select Supply Diffuser . verify that Constrain is cleared.Rectangular Face Round Neck . NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. for Flow. enter 425 CFM. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and then select both Copy and Multiple.

24 In the Open dialog. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 In the drawing area. select one of the diffusers. and click Open. As you place the return diffusers. 29 Place 2 diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 22 In the drawing area. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. click Yes. and then press Esc. 21 On the Options Bar. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. as shown.rfa. clear Leader. Next. click Place on Face. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 27 Select Return Diffuser . 28 On the Placement tab.

34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . select Strong Reference. 32 In the Project Browser. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Level. under Other. 31 In the alert dialog. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click to select the lines. for Reference. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. select one of the return diffusers. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click OK.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. as shown. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Yes.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. click the Level 1 line. enter 9' 0"2750. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Constraints ➤ Offset. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. and click OK. ■ ■ For the end point. For the start point. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. 44 Zoom in to space 115.

Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. indicating that it’s the active view. you also use the System Browser to validate systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . right-click the title. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. In this exercise. and click View ➤ Systems. When you highlight a space. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed.Design is highlighted. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. the space crossing lines display. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. including energy analysis.HVAC Plan . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. click Training Files. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Press Esc. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing.rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. After creating the logical connection. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. However.

6 Keep the System Browser open. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. the number of elements is updated. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. review the Number of Elements. As you add diffusers to systems. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. On the Options Bar. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 15 Click Cancel. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and Flow value. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. System Name. Connect Into. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 11 In the drawing area. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 12 In the System Browser.

you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 26 Click Finish Editing System. for Mark. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 22 Click OK. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). under Mechanical. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. Rename the system Next. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. under Identity Data. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you also use the System Browser to validate systems.17 Using the method learned previously. 18 Click OK. for System Name. In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. and the system connects them. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 25 Click OK. the air terminals are the children. which updates the name in the System Browser.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Network type provides several solutions.rvt. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the space crossing lines display. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions.Design is highlighted. select the upper left diffuser. A Generate Layout tab displays. select Network. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. click Training Files. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the drawing area. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. which provides various layout tools. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . When you highlight a space using the cursor.HVAC Plan. for Solution Type. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. 5 On the Options Bar. In this case.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and display solution 1. Also.

For Offset. click Modify. as shown. For Duct Type. Select Branch. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. enter 9' 10 1/2". enter 3'. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Flex Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. enter 9' 10 1/2".Round. For Maximum Flex Duct Length.7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. you’ll get an error in a later step. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 9 On the Generate Layout panel. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Settings. Click OK.

NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.11 Click Finish Layout. For example. or manually modify the duct. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. as is the elbow itself. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . select a different layout solution. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.

Using a flow-based color scheme. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. a disconnection exists.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Usually. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. under Graphics. and click OK. select By View. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and click to select it. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. but not all values are used in this view. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. select Duct Color Fill . 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. highlight a segment of the main duct. for Values Displayed. for Color Scheme. fittings. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. thus it is not part of the system. If the entire network does not highlight. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. and equipment. and then click OK. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. The first time you press Tab. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. you can verify connectivity as you create a system.Flow.

select the WSHP. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Airflow. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Mechanical .The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and press Enter. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area.Velocity. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and then press Esc to clear the selection. select Duct Color Fill . note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 26 Click OK. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and on the Options Bar. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select one of the diffusers in the system. for Flow. 20 In the drawing area. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. for Schemes. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and click OK. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. select the color scheme legend.

08 in-wg/100ft. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). click Cancel. Select Only. and then click to select it. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Select the upper segment of main duct. Click OK. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Under Constraints. The ductwork and fittings are updated. and drag it to the right. for Branch Sizing. Select Restrict Height. select Calculated Size Only. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and enter . 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Friction. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. and select 16". highlight a segment of the duct.

and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Using this tool. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and pressure loss. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). pressure. static pressure. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Use the information that displays (flow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection).

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.NOTE As you inspect a system. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. click Training Files. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 35 Click Finish. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. also known as the critical path. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.

7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and click Draw Duct.HVAC Plan .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and select the WSHP. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.

select the top right diffuser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Front. right-click the connector grip.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 15 On the ViewCube. and click Draw Duct. 11 On the Options Bar. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. click the corner where the Top. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. double-click MEP . select 9' 10 1/2". Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Offset.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . NOTE When drawing duct.3D MEP.

in space 115. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. The ductwork is automatically created. the color fill indicates the flow value. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 18 Make the floor plan the active view. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 22 Using the same method. it is considered a closed loop. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . select the top unconnected supply diffuser.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Also.

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 25 Press Esc. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning. and select the top left diffuser. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to select it. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 30 Press Esc twice. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and then click Modify.

for Flow. under Constraints. and click OK. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 40 Using the same method.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. under Mechanical . Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and then click OK. such as a plenum. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. select a segment of the main duct.Airflow. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear Restrict Height.

In this lesson. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Then. Create return and supply piping systems.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Automatically and manually lay out piping. 109 . Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.

including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you place mechanical equipment. click Training Files. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . on level 3 of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt.

A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. and select WSHP . verify that Wall faces is selected. indicating that it’s the active view.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.HVAC Plan . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .2-6 Tons .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.Design is highlighted. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. in corridor 328.High Efficiency .Left Return . 7 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Horizontal .

click the top edge of the WSHP. and in the Type Selector. click the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. and click to place the dimension. as shown.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and enter 2'. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.8 Click the corridor wall face.

Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. select the 2 WSHPs. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 12 GPM. Click OK. enter 9'. for Offset.14 Click Modify. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and click to place it in the mechanical room. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Water Flow. as shown. Under Mechanical. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. Create the logical connection between the system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 22 Close the file with or without saving it. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. you create the return and supply piping systems. including flow and pressure. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.21 Click Modify. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.

where it is easier to review the information. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. click Training Files.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan .Mech 330). 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. Creating a Piping System | 115 . analyses cannot be performed. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . but without a corresponding system. You can create pipes to connect system components. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Unlike logical connections (systems). Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. right-click the Systems column heading. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and click View ➤ Piping. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 5 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.

the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. select the 2 WSHPs. 10 On the Options Bar. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area.In the System Browser. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. for System Name. select the boiler. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Assigning a system component to an existing system. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Therefore. 12 In the drawing area. and the Edit System tool is not active. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Notice that on the Options Bar. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. while pressing Ctrl. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. This display indicates that the system is selected. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. As you assign equipment to systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

Creating a Piping System | 117 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.13 Click Finish Editing System. You have created the hydronic return system.Design. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 19 In the Project Browser.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.HVAC Plan . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 17 On the Options Bar. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. and select the cooling tower. for System Name. under Design ➤ HVAC . Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. double-click Roof .

28 Using the same method. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. In cooling mode. expand the Hydronic Return system category. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. indicating the logical connection. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. In heating mode. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. and bypasses the cooling tower. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 29 Right-click CHWS.22 In the Select Connector dialog. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 23 Close the roof plan view. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Select. 25 Select the boiler. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and click OK. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. and click Expand All.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. for Water Flow. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . you can view several parameters. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component.In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. expand Piping. and click OK. and click Properties. and click Column Settings. 32 In the System Browser. enter 18 GPM. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog.

The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).rvt. 5 In the Filter dialog.Mech 330). When you draw a box to select components. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. you can place the cursor over a system component. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A system preview displays in red. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 10 Click OK. 9 In the Select a System dialog. select Mechanical Equipment.Design is highlighted. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. the boiler. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.HVAC Plan . and click OK. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. press Tab to highlight the system. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC plan view range are highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. then the Select a System dialog displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to select it. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. click Check None. click Training Files. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select CHWR. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. verify that Solutions is selected. It does not reference the architecture.11 On the Options Bar. enter 1' 6''. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Perimeter. duct. For Inset. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. click Settings. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 13 Click Cancel. or architectural components. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. structural beams. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the flow for one WSHP is 18. With each Tab. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. to display the path with thinner lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. and the flow for the other is 12. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 19 In the drawing area. 17 Optionally. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. and press Tab 3 times.16 Click Finish Layout.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 24 Press Esc. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 23 Under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). under Mechanical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK. and click OK. 22 Select the boiler. and access its instance properties. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM.

30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. click Edit System. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 27 On the System Tools panel. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. you physically close the CHWR loop. 32 Click Finish Editing System. On the Options Bar. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. the Number of Elements is now 8.HVAC Plan . 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 28 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . Logically.Design. Next.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. which propagates flow throughout the system. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). as shown. 35 Using the drag control. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . under Mechanical. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. 38 Using the same method. access its instance properties. and click Cancel. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. select a WSHP.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial.

41 Click OK. enter 1' 6''. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above.40 In the Select a System dialog. For Inset. enter 0''/12''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Slope. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. Click Settings. select CHWS. and then click OK. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

46 Click Modify. as shown. 48 While pressing Ctrl. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 47 In the drawing area. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). In a later exercise. as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. (Both sections are at the same elevation. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control.

select a different layout solution. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.50 Using the same method. Either relocate the system components. To create the piping system. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Add piping to close the supply loop. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 51 Click Finish Layout. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system.

you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. As you work in the training file.Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the return pipes are magenta. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .rvt. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . double-click 3D HVAC Building. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.

Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 6 Press Delete. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. select the section of piping.

■ Click to move the piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Move the cursor up 4''.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the 3D view. Click to specify the reference point. select the boiler. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

and click OK. 12 In the 3D view. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and the lower one is secondary. select the boiler. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and click Draw Pipe. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 13 In the plan view.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the return pipe riser. The connections are automatically created. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . for Offset. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down.In a plan view. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and you select 1 connector. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 2'. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. enter 1' . 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.7''. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.

as shown. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and select it. As you place piping runs that are close together. 19 In the plan view. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 18 Press Esc twice. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK. select the primary base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created.

28 Press Esc. you select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and when the connector point displays. and click to draw the pipe. 29 If necessary. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. right-click the bottom connector. click to connect to the pump. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 27 Move the cursor to the right.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee.

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. 33 Press Esc. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector. 31 On the Options Bar. for Offset.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. enter 4'.

3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and press Enter. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the bottom control on the tee. type 1'. and click to create the pipe. enter 9' 6''. for Offset. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. ■ Move the cursor down.

you validate the flow through the system. and click Element Properties.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. Next. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. right-click.

48 In the plan view. for Cooling Water Flow.39 In the Instance Properties dialog.50 or 50% of the Flow. In the Instance Properties dialog. view the properties for the secondary pump. When you create the pumps in parallel. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 46 Press Esc. 41 Using the same method. 44 In the 3D view. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that under Mechanical. select the cooling tower. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . the value is 0 GPM. Connect the cooling tower Next. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). The flow is being propagated through the piping. 40 Click Cancel. 42 Click OK. right-click. and click Element Properties. and click OK. 43 Press Esc. under Mechanical. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). as shown. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . under Mechanical.

49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

50 In the 3D View. When the valve is open. Adding Valves In this exercise. select the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. the water bypasses the cooling tower. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. and is heated by the boiler. and close the dialog. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.

verify that the Diameter value is 3''. as shown. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. 8 Press Esc twice. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. Adding Valves | 143 . and select Ball Valve . indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

12 Select Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. place another Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.

validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. under Mechanical.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. 19 Using the same method. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and select Ball Valve . and click Element Properties. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select the bypass valve. Adding Valves | 145 . In heating mode. right-click. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and select Ball Valve . You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). and click OK. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.

you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. Initially.22 Using the method you just learned. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM.rvt.Design is highlighted. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM.

and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. click Pipe Color Fill . and click OK.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. for Schemes. Sizing Pipe | 147 . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. select Pipe Color Fill .Size. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.Flow.

select Friction. enter 5 FPS. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Click OK. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Press Esc. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Under Constraints. and for Velocity. and enter 2. Select And. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. and click to select the branch.25 FT/100ft. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. for Branch Sizing.

or offset elevations are incorrect. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select a different layout solution. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Using the System Inspector. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Either relocate the system components.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting the System In this exercise. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.rvt. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspecting the System | 149 . pressure. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.

An inspection flag reports the section number. and pressure information including pressure loss. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. as required. This information helps you modify the system design. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. flow. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping.

as shown. you need to validate them.67 psi. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Click Finish. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM.88 psi. targeting those systems that need attention.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. select 90° F. and the Pressure Loss is 1. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. inspect Section 6 again. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . In this exercise. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 9 Using the same method. the Static Pressure is 7. and to size pipe.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.89 psi. and click OK. for Fluid Temperature.

The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.Design.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the System Browser. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. After you assign components to a system. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. If you place components without assigning them to a system. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Warnings display. and double-click Level 3 . 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Show to view all of the system components. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. double-click Level 1 . and click View. 9 Right-click CHWS. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.HVAC Plan . but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. 7 In the System Browser. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 4 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. right-click the Systems titlebar.rvt. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. As you learned when placing components. thus assigning the components to a system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.Design. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.HVAC Plan . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. the pipe is associated with that system. After you have assigned all components to systems. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). and for pipe sizing. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. For example. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

expand the Unassigned folder. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 13 Right-click CHWR.TIP If you have multiple views open. and select Level 3 . Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 12 In the System Browser. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 10 Using the same methods. and click Expand All.Design floor plan. 14 Using the methods that you learned. right-click Hydronic Return. click Close. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and confirm unassigned system components. otherwise.HVAC Plan . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.

154 .

155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Define required lighting. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .

distribution systems. enter 1.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. ■ ■ For Factor.04. select 90. ■ ■ For Material. enter THHN.Wire Sizes. Select Correction Factor. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. select Copper. click (Open). For Temperature. You also add a wiring type. select Copper. and demand factors that are applied in the design. As you place components and create circuits. For Material. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. click Training Files. expand Wiring . In this exercise you review electrical settings. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. wiring. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. For Temperature Rating. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select 75. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. speeding up the design phase. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ Click New Correction Factor. select Wiring Types.rvt.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

Click Background Color. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.■ ■ For Value. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. for Custom Colors. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. select Red. Click OK three times.

using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Then. Create power loads. as you place lighting fixtures. First. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Use the System Browser to check your design. power circuits. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. 167 . Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Create a panel schedule.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.rvt. click Training Files. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.00 fc. Click OK.Lighting Color Fill view is open.00 fc. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . Under Scheme Definition. select the color for Less Than 20. for Basic Colors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can create additional color schemes. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. In the Color dialog. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. select Average Estimated Illumination. select Orange. select the color legend. 2 In the drawing area. By using orange as the color for this range. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open). ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. for the Spaces Category.

expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.7 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . all three of these colored fields will clear to white. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. which is the lowest value in the specified range. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. The red field will clear once the +/.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. zoom to space Library 219. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.Lighting Ceiling plan. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.277. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . 13 Click the Level 2 .5 fc range. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 .5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.5 fc range is satisfied. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.

The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Press ESC to end the command. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 18 Click to place the fixture. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 25 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. 23 Click OK. the fixtures will move accordingly. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar. select Multiple.

Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.32 Press ESC.

37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . and for Category. 36 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .277V. select Lighting Fixtures. Click OK.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. The lighting delta is satisfied. select Multiple Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 42 In the drawing area. click the ceiling grid line as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .277V.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you modify the light fixture IES files.rvt. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. click Training Files.45 Press ESC to end the command.

5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. scroll to view space space Library 219. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 2 Tile the views as shown. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Lighting Plan. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Color Fill plan. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 .

Under Electrical. click the value for Initial Intensity. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Under Identity Data. specify 15000. click the value for Initial Color. In the Name dialog. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.ies and click Open. In the Select File dialog. ■ Click OK twice. for Ballast Loss Factor. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . for Color Preset. for Apparent Load. Under Photometrics. select Xenon and click OK. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.00 VA. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Under Photometrics. enter F15. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.00 lm. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. enter . ■ Click Apply. and click OK. select 463T5_S. Click OK. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Under Photometrics. for Lamp. select Luminous Flux.277V and click OK. for Type Mark. ■ Under Photometrics. enter 162.93. select T5 [HO].85.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. enter .

Click OK. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. and for Category.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixtures. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 10 In the Filter dialog.277V. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. click Check None. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.Press Delete. select the top center fixture. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Note the lighting delta updates again. 15 In space Library 219.

Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

In the next exercise. and receptacles to your design. and Receptacles | 183 .rvt. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Junction Boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add switches. 2 In the drawing area. Placing Switches. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP.Press Delete. click Training Files. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Placing Switches. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Junction Boxes. click (Open). and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. junction boxes.

Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .277V. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 7 Click to place the switch. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.

NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 12 In the Load Family dialog. and Receptacles | 185 . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Placing Switches. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Select Junction Boxes . The element type Junction Boxes . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.rfa and click Open.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Under Electrical. for Mark. enter JB-1NL. Click OK twice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . note the Number of Poles is 1. NOTE When entering values. 21 In the drawing area. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. In the Type Properties dialog. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. Click Edit Type. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. for Level 2 . you can enter a space to separate the unit values. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter 9’0”. 15 Select the junction box.14 Press ESC to end the command.Offset. zoom to space Library 219.

Distribution System. Junction Boxes. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. NOTE If necessary. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 187 . Click OK. 24 For any column. and Number of Elements. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. 23 In the System Browser. Expand General. Expand Electrical. 26 In the System Browser. Select Load. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. right-click and click Column Settings. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. and Voltage.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Select Size. Space Number. Space Name. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window.

30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 31 Close the System Browser. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 38 Select the receptacle. Junction Boxes. select Copy and Multiple. Placing Switches. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.

and enter 12’ and press ENTER. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . move the cursor along the wall.

and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.

47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. 2 In the drawing area. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).equipment. and work toward the higher voltage. zoom to the space Electrical 220. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. click Training Files. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 9 On the Options Bar.Loads.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical .Surface: 100A. #1 Pole Breakers.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . enter 20. for Distribution System. 7 Press ESC to end the command. select 480/277 Wye. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 120/208 Wye. 14 Select the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 8 Select the panelboard. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. enter PP-2B. For Panel Name. Click OK. for Max. for Distribution System.

zoom to space Instruction 221. which is the logical connection between the elements. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 23 In the Filter dialog. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. For Panel Name. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. click Check None. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter LP-2B. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. for Max.Loads. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter 20. #1 Pole Breakers. 20 In the drawing area. Click OK. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. Click OK. and for Category.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

32 Press ESC.28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch.

43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4.Loads. except without wire. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Click OK. and for Category. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 2. Click OK. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 41 In the Filter dialog. for Hot Conductors. click Check None. select Wires. click (Open). 38 Press ESC to end the command.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. right-click on the Systems heading. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Expand Electrical. Rating. Voltage. Distribution System. 2 In the drawing area. 13 In the System Browser. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and verify that Load. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. click Training Files. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and then expand circuit 1. Click OK. expand Power. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.rvt. and Voltage Drop are selected.

20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Click OK. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. under Electrical. 30 Close the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V.

Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Click Tags. Click OK. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 40 Click OK twice. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Click Yes. 47 In the drawing area. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Type Mark. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 44 In the Edit Label dialog.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 35 Press ESC to end the command. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. click Edit Type. note the label parameters and click Cancel. click below the first one to place it. enter FR4. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated.

53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 52 In the Save As dialog. and for Category. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click Save. and click Apply. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. click Check None. for File Name. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. select Break. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. enter a comma. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Next you create a switch system. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. For Circuit Number. 56 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Click OK. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. select Lighting Fixture Tags.rfa. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label .

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open).rvt. under Electrical Lighting. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. enter a. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Click OK. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 2 In the drawing area. for Switch ID.

Lighting. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Click OK. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. under Electrical . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. enter b. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for switch ID. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

click Check None. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. lighting. click Training Files. 4 In the Filter dialog. select Electrical Fixtures. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). and for Category. Next you create a circuit and size wire. In the left pane of the Open dialog.26 Close the file with or without saving it. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rvt. Circuits are used for power. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and data systems. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. select the PP-2B panel. click (Open). 7 In space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area.

Click OK. for Hot Conductors. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Select the wire again. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks.Loads. and click Element Properties. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select Wiring.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. enter 2. and in the drawing area. 19 Click OK. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.rfa. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and in the right pane.

and click to select the circuit. 22 In space Electrical 220. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. Creating Power Loads | 209 . press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. as shown. select the PP-2B panel. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires.

click the connector of the first receptacle. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.26 Press Delete. 28 In the drawing area. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. as shown. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. in space Instruction 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 In space Instruction 221. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.

click Training Files. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. click Open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select panel LP-2B. zoom to space Electrical 220. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Finally. 3 In the Electrical space. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Next you balance the loads for your design.

11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog.3616 VA).3712 VA. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. Scroll down. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 1-#10. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 12 Select panel PP-2B. click Rebalance Loads. for Rating. Phase B 3636 VA. 1-#12. Click OK. 1-#12. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and Phase C .4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. enter 30A. B. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 6 Click OK. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Under Electrical-Loads. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 1-#10. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog.

rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. for Rating.15 Select panel PP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 30A. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 .Loads. 17 Close the warning dialog. Click OK. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Loads. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click OK. and click OK. under Electrical . click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. enter 25A. for Rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click Training Files. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. Select PP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. under Electrical . you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.

drag PP-2B onto the sheet. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 5 In the Project Browser. 4 Close the report. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Header Text. click (Open). for Font. select Bold and Italic. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. under Other. Under Header Text. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. expand Sheets (all). This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 7 Select the schedule. click Edit. for Font Size.Panel Schedules. and open E601 . enter 1/8. for Appearance. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 11 Click OK twice. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i.rvt. for Font Size. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. select Berlin Sans FB. enter 3/32. Under Body Text. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 In the Project Browser.

10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select space Lounge 212. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. In the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Expand Unassigned. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. In the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. each with a load of 180VA.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Checking Your Design | 215 . Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. press TAB once.

20 On the Options Bar. zoom to space Electrical 214. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 15 In the dialog. for Panel. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Close the details dialog. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 18 Select panel LP-2C. select MDP-1. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 17 In the drawing area. under Warnings.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Vent. right-click PVC . in addition to loading existing families.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. planning is critical to a successful design. you create a PVC pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and click Properties. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.rvt. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Name dialog. type PVC . click Duplicate. In this lesson.Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. In this exercise. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. and verify that Level 1 .Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 219 . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. Adding a pipe size. click Training Files.

DWV. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. enter 27/32''. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 For Inside Diameter. select Branch. and click Main. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 13 In the right panel. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 22 Click New Size. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. enter 5/8''.DWV: Standard. 15 For System Type. 26 Click OK. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.5 In the Type Properties dialog. for Nominal.PVC . enter 10°. 17 In the left pane. Tee. For Offset. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 18 For System Type. 21 In the right pane. select Tee. PVC . The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. In the Project Browser. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. under Pipe Types. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. select None. select Sanitary. 10 On the Selection panel. 6 Click OK. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.DWV: Standard.Sch 40 . click Training Files.Vent is listed.0''. click Modify. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.PVC .Sch 40 .PVC . enter -4' .rfa. select Sanitary. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. enter 1/2''. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . click Pipe Settings. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click OK. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. for Material. select Tee Vent . 27 For the new pipe size. select Plastic. Tap. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .Sch 40 . Cross. 25 For Outside. under Mechanical.

Create the sanitary plumbing system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. sanitary piping. 221 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. add a hot water heater. Create the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. vent. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and hot and cold water piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the cold water system.

2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. as shown. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE To identify a space name and number. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Training Files. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. you add 2 toilets. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan .Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 1 urinal. including the men’s room (space Male 107).rvt. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.1. as shown. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.6 gpf. against the left wall.Wall Mounted. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. under Water Closet . 1 wall-mounted urinal. 5 On the Placement panel. in the Type Selector. and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. 4 On the Element panel. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . select Public .Flush Valve . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.

NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. and press Esc. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. under Urinal . use the reference line to center the fixture. above the first in the standard toilet space. zoom in closer.Wall Hung. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .) 8 Press Esc. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.7 Click to place another toilet. (Again.

you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 14 Click Modify. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). select 5''x5'' Strainer . 12 On the Placement panel. click Place on Face.Rectangular. In placing the fixture. under Floor Drain .2'' Drain.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector.

21 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. In this exercise.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and review the components listed under this system. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and Default Domestic Cold Water. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. click Training Files. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. and click View ➤ Piping. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. and a floor drain. right-click in the System Browser table heading. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a urinal. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors).rvt. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector.

4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and verify that Level 1 . clear Lines (<Overhead>).Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 In the Filter dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. 6 In the plan view. 2 In the Project Browser.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Plumbing Plan . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

If you deselected the drain. so the Create Sanitary System is available. expand Sanitary. for System Name. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. click Finish Editing System. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. You include the bathroom space number in the name. enter Sanitary 107. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. 12 On the Edit System panel. 13 In the Systems Browser. 11 On the Options Bar.

The base is placed. 16 In the Select a System dialog. and click OK. a toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. as shown. at the midpoint of the detail lines. A preview of the piping layout displays. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . for example. select one of the components in the system. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. select Sanitary 107.

25 On the Options Bar. 24 In the left pane. 21 On Options Bar. select Intersections. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. and for Offset. select 4''. enter 1/8'' / 12''. and click Settings. 26 On the Options Bar. click Solutions. 27 Click Modify. enter -1' 0''. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. The default settings are automatically modified. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. for Slope. enter -1' 0''. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Solution Type. You accept this suggested solution. enter -4'-0”. for Offset. for Diameter. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click OK. select Main. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements.19 On the Options Bar. 23 For Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. and modify it to meet project requirements. select Branch. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point.

Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

as shown. 31 Click Modify.30 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.33 Using the previous method.

234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view.

and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. 38 Close the file with or without saving it.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. and check the slope control. you continue with the work from the last exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . adding sinks in the men’s room.

click Training Files.Rectangular. 4 On the Element panel. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. under Lavatory .rvt. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 5 On the Placement panel. in the Type Selector. and verify that Level 1 . as shown.Public. select 22''x22'' . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.

in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. select Multiple. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.7 Click Modify. TIP When entering dimensions. enter 2' 4''. On the Options Bar. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 8 Select the sink. For example. and press Enter to create a second sink. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches.

click Finish Editing System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 16 On the Edit System panel. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. click Add To System. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 15 Click the 3 sinks. and press Enter to create the third sink. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Press Esc. 11 In the System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 12 In the drawing area.

In the System Browser. 19 In the 3D view. 22 In the plan view. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. double-click 3D Plumbing. as shown. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 20 Select the fitting. 21 Select the tee. and click Draw Pipe. with the tee fitting selected. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. use the ViewCube to orient the view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . right-click the top connector (sanitary connector).

the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 1/8'' / 12''. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. and click Apply. for Offset. enter 2' . 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 24 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. and click to draw the pipe. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 26 On the Options Bar. for Slope. press Spacebar. 27 Click Modify.6''. In this example.

under Wye 45 Deg Double .DWV. move the cursor over the stub pipe. click to place the fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. and when the vertical center line displays.PVC .Sch 40 . select Standard. 31 Click Modify. 32 Select the double wye fitting. 30 In the 3D view. 29 In the Type Selector.

242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Draw Pipe. on the Options Bar. In the next steps. right-click the right connector. 34 Press Esc. for Offset. and press Enter. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 37 Select the fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. enter 1'.33 With the fitting selected.

draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 40 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 42 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. as shown. 41 Using the same method.

draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. and press Esc. 46 In the section view. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. press Spacebar. 48 Click Modify. enter 6''.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom connector. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 47 Move the cursor down. 49 Using the same method.

50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. select the P-Trap on the left. 53 Using the same method. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 55 In the 3D view. 54 Click Modify. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 52 In the plan view.Sch 40 . under Trap P . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .DWV.PVC . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 56 Using the same method. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 51 In the Type Selector. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

connect the right sink to the double wye. 58 Using the same method.. Move the cursor to the left. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. select the left P-Trap. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click in the plan view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. enter 6''. and press Enter. In the plan view. Click Modify.

as shown. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. In the Type Selector. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. On the Routing Solutions panel. under Pipe Types. while pressing Ctrl. while pressing Ctrl. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. select the section of pipe you just drew. select PVC Sanitary. Press Esc. and select a proposed solution. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution.■ In the 3D view.

rvt. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. and verify the slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 62 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Finish. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. for Slope. adjusting the sanitary stack.

3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Floor level line.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Design. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Sch 40 . 9 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Section view. 5 Select the tee. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Plumbing Plan . and click to draw the pipe. select the elbow fitting on the right. select the vertical stack. as shown. click Modify. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select Standard.Overall.DWV. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . right-click the top connector. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. and click Draw Pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .PVC . 7 On the Selection panel. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Design. 10 In the 3D view. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.

PVC . as shown. and click the rotate control to change the orientation.Sch 40 . 13 Click the rotate control once. 18 In the plan view. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under Plug .DWV.11 Click Modify. for Offset. select Standard. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 Select the fitting. 15 Press Esc. enter 1'-0”. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.

and verify that Level 1 . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.rvt. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .19 Click Modify.Design is open.Plumbing Plan . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Check None. and click Main. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. enter 9' 3''. select Domestic Hot Water. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 14 In the System Browser. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. double-click 3D Plumbing . for System Type. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 9 In the left pane. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. select Main. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and sinks. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Branch. select Domestic Hot Water. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors.) 10 Click OK. For Offset. expand Unassigned.Design ➤ 3D Views. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. under Design ➤ Plumbing . select Branch. minimize the Sanitary system. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. for System Type. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system.Overall. 15 In the plan view. 7 In the left pane. 6 In the left pane. draw a selection box to select the toilets. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. and click OK. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. if necessary. 17 In the Filter dialog. select Pipe Types: Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. select Domestic Cold Water. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select Plumbing Fixtures. and for System Type. urinal. 4 In the right pane.

23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. For Flow Conversion Method. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. 19 On the System Tools panel. enter DCW 107. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. click Edit System. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . Notice that the water main displays in blue. In the System Browser. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. click Finish Editing System. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 21 On the Edit System panel.

as shown. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter.2 7/8''. under Pipe Types. 30 In the plan view. select Water. enter 7''. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. For Offset. and click the connector. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 31 On the Options Bar. select 3/4''. and press Enter. as shown. click to the left of the urinal. right-click the top DCW connector. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. enter 10'. at the intersection of the water main pipe. connect the second toilet. 28 In the Type Selector. and click to place the pipe. select the sink above the urinal. for Offset. enter 0”/12”. and click Draw Pipe. 34 In the plan view. enter 3' . 36 Move the cursor to the left.25 Using the same method. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. 33 Click Modify. 37 On the Options Bar. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. For Slope. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. enter 4'0”. and press Enter. 35 In the Type Selector. 32 Move the cursor to the right.

40 Click Modify. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click OK. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . and click to connect to the main cold water line. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 41 Select the top sink.39 Move the cursor to the left. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

44 Using the same method. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . add a water heater. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 6 In the plan view. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. expand the Unassigned folder.rvt. and verify that Level 1 . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . click Training Files. 5 In the System Browser.Design is open. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. select the 3 sinks.Plumbing Plan . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. while pressing Ctrl. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 In the Project Browser.Overall.

Default Domestic Hot Water. 14 Click Modify. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. you edit the system to add equipment.6 Gallon. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that DCW 107 is selected. as shown. 13 In the plan view. and click OK. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 15 In the System Browser. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. and click Edit System. 10 In the System Browser. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. When designing systems. for System Name.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. in the Unassigned folder.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. select 0. In later steps. 12 In the Type Selector. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Default Domestic Cold Water. under Water Heater .Tankless. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Slope: 0''/12''. and select Draw Pipe. 23 On the Options Bar. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . Offset: 4' 6''. for Offset. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 22 In the Type Selector. select the water heater. 19 Select the water heater. and on the Edit System panel. enter 1' 6''. 24 Move the cursor up. right-click the middle left connector. enter 10’. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. as shown. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 25 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. 27 Click Modify. and click the water main line. click Finish Editing System.

and for Offset. enter 9' 0''. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. and click Draw Pipe. click Edit System. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 33 On the Edit System panel. select a sink. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Diameter. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and in the System Selector. 37 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. select 4'-6''. 30 On the System Tools panel. for Offset. click Finish Editing System. enter 1''.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and on the Placement Tools panel. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 35 On the Options Bar. enter 1' 6''. as shown. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 36 Move the cursor down.

enter 1’. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar. and click just above the bottom sink. 42 Click Modify. for Offset. 41 Move the cursor down.39 Move the cursor down. enter 2' 8''. as shown.

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and click Duplicate. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 267 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. However. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.rvt. go to http://www. After finishing each exercise. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. In this tutorial. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i.autodesk. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you can choose to save your work. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 2 Right-click Standard. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. You create a new pipe type. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. click Training Files. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In this lesson. If the tutorial training files are not present. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.

duct. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. verify that 9' 0" is selected. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. for Material. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. you create project parameters and work with schedules.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). In the left pane. For Offset. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In this exercise. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. select Carbon Steel. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and enter Fire Protection Wet. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. verify that 9' 0" is specified. 9 Click OK. you modify the type properties of the pipe. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For System Type. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. select Fire Protection Wet. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Main. select Fire Protection Wet. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. For System Type. or architectural components. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and then click OK. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. In the next exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. structural beams. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. For Pipe Type. However. and click Properties. click Rename. For Offset. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. Next.

select Spaces. click Training Files. 8 Using a crossing window.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.rvt. For Group parameter under. under Fire Protection. When you highlight a space using the cursor. for Sprinkler Zone. enter Zone 1. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. right-click. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. enter Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the drawing area. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Fire Protection. 5 Click OK twice.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Under Categories. and click Element Properties.Fire Protection Plan . the space crossing lines display. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. select space Instruction 221 as shown. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .Design is highlighted. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click OK. for Name. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Add. select the upper half of the building.

for Sprinkler Zone. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that only Spaces are selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Fire Protection. under Fire Protection.rvt. select Zone 1. you create schedules for sprinkler design. enter Zone 2. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 13 Using the same method. to which you add various parameters. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click OK. including a calculated value parameter. click Training Files. 10 In the Filter dialog. and then access instance properties. and click OK.

enter Protection Area Construction Type. select Feet and fractional inches. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Add Parameter. 9 On the Formatting tab. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Select Schedule keys. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. select Maximum Spacing. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 6 Using the same method. For Rounding. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Obstructed-Combustible. enter Maximum Spacing. indicating that it’s the active view. click the Formatting tab. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 10 In the Format dialog. For Key name. select To the nearest 1'. select Fire Protection.Design is highlighted. For Group parameter under. double-click on each column separator. and click Field Format. select Spaces. For Units. enter Light.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. and on the ribbon. For Name. 7 Click OK. select Length. In the Maximum Spacing column. For Type of Parameter. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. Click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . for Name. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Click OK. 14 Select the new header. The schedule displays. enter 15. 11 Click OK twice.Fire Protection Plan .

Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. For Name. select Spaces. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. enter Sprinkler Schedule. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. under Available fields. Unobstructed Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. NOTE The units of measure display automatically.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. enter 130. and press Enter. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light.

Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. For Rounding. select Level. 22 Click OK twice. select Area. For Type. In the Fields dialog. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Formula. For Then by. under Other. and click View Properties. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Discipline. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 19 Click the Formatting tab. Enter the formula operator / after Area. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select Header and Blank line. and click OK. select Fixed. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Number. click . 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). for Sort by. select Minimum Sprinklers.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select 0 decimal place. For Units. 20 On the Formatting tab. and click Field Format. click Edit. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. select Common. select Sprinkler Zone. for Sorting/Grouping. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog.

On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. and select Totals only. For Then by (second instance). 30 Click OK twice. At the bottom of the dialog. click Edit. select Level. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Fields. for Filter by. select Minimum Sprinklers. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . ■ In the Format dialog. right-click the schedule. Under Field formatting. select Hidden field. select Sprinkler Zone. 27 In the drawing area. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Grand totals. for Filter. select Number.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. and then select Hidden field. and then click Field Format. select Level equals Level 2. verify that Use default settings is selected. For Fields.

use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Calculate totals. delete the word Maximum. double-click Type. select Sprinklers. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Available fields. select Embedded Schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. under Other. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . click Edit. On the Formatting tab. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. For Category. for Fields. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and select Totals only. Under Field formatting. and click View Properties. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Grand totals. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Embedded Schedule. select Count. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. and Count. System Name.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule.

use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 50 Access the instance properties. double-click FP . 43 Click Cancel.Fire Protection Plan Design. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. for Protection Area Construction Type. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. As a result. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click in the floor plan to make it the active view. for Protection Area Construction Type. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. but their values are not determined. and click OK. 41 In the plan view. under Identity Data. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 48 In the floor plan. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 46 With the space still selected.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 44 In the schedule. Unobstructed. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. select Ordinary. select Light. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select space 221 Instruction. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Unobstructed. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Unobstructed. and access the instance properties. and the spacing parameter values are evident. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. select Ordinary. 52 Click OK. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. and double-click Level 2 .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. At the end of this tutorial. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. After finishing each exercise. click Training Files. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .autodesk. If the tutorial training files are not present. you will understand the process. you can choose to save your work. By following the recommended workflow. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. As you create the system. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. methodology. 279 .Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. As you place the sprinklers. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. However. go to http://www. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement.

280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. When there is a small misalignment. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. When this happens. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. After placing the initial sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building.

while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sprinklers | 281 .Pendent . 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 In the drawing area. select the sprinklers that you placed.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and click to place 3 sprinklers. and select Sprinkler . Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 10 Press Esc twice. as shown. 9 In space Instruction 202.

and then press Esc. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. verify that Constrain is cleared. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 13 On the Options Bar. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Also.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Next. as shown. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.

click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. enter 10' 6". open Design ➤ FP .Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.Design. 19 In the floor plan. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. you adjust the offset. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Number.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. enter 14' 6". it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 200B. for Offset. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 18 Type WT. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 29 Press Esc. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. Next. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and press Enter.FP_Ceiling view. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. specify a vertical offset. 17 In the Project Browser. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and 200C). 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. under Constraints. move the cursor to the right.Fire Protection Plan . Notice that the schedule updates. enter 11. 25 Click OK. and click Element Properties. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. This number is determined in the schedule. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 .

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.Fire Protection Plan . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and with piping (physical connection).Design is highlighted. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. After creating the logical connection. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.30 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. Unlike logical connections (systems). click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. However. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view. In the next exercise. In this exercise. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.

As you assign sprinklers to systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. In the System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. as shown. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and select Piping. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. named Fire Protection Wet. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. click View ➤ Systems. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. within the Piping Systems folder. 5 Right-click the header. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected.

click Settings. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Next.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. verify that Main is selected. indicating the logical connection. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. For Offset. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. The Edit Piping System panel displays. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. select Branch. and select the system. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. place the cursor over a sprinkler. and a piping layout preview displays. 15 In the drawing area. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. In the left pane. For Pipe Type. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. and number of elements in the system. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and on the Options Bar. 19 Click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. providing system editing tools. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 13 In the System Browser. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. The Generate Layout tools are activated. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. press Tab. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. enter FP Wet_Zone2. verify that 9' 0" is specified. for System Name. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and click Select.Wet is selected. 11 With the system still selected. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . system equipment. select an initial piping layout. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

and green represents branch lines). 22 On the Options Bar. click Place Base. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. as shown. When the layout is finished. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. and select solution 5. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. In general. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 23 For Offset. click Solutions. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 .20 On the Generate Layout panel. select 2". verify that Network is selected. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. enter -12' 0". for Diameter.

The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. as shown. 29 Click Finish Layout. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. click Modify. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. A (parallel movement control) displays. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. On the Generate Layout panel.

the Connect Into tool. or that offset elevations are incorrect. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. or manually modify the pipe. Next. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . and various manual pipe creation tools. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. select a different layout solution. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Either relocate the system components.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 32 If necessary.

4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.rvt. 3 If necessary. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 2 Zoom in. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. mechanical equipment. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. verify that Network is selected. 8 In the corridor. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 13 Click Finish Layout. and select solution 5. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. click Finish Editing System. 5 In the drawing area. and pipe or duct is created. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. air terminals. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. you can select the pipe or duct. 18 Click Finish Editing System. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. click Add To System. for Solution Type. 9 On the Edit System panel. 14 Close the System Browser. verify that Solutions is selected. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). or a system component to display system tools. radiators. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 12 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel.

and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 23 View the result in the 3D view.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 24 In the Piping Plan.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 27 On the Options Bar. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 21 In the Piping Plan. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 29 Using the same method. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. right-click. 28 In the drawing area. 25 Select the sprinkler. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and click Draw Pipe. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then tile the views. select 9'. for Offset. and then press Esc. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe.

and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 31 In the plan view.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . Because the whole system highlights.

rvt. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. select 1/4" = 1'-0".Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 4 On the Options Bar.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Scale. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. ■ 6 Press Esc. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.Fire Protection Plan . double-click on the section head to open the section view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter.

as shown. for Diameter. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). and maximize the floor plan. select 1 1/4". The pipe diameter is modified. 26 Using the same method. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. and then tag the piping as shown. 24 In the drawing area. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 23 Close the 3D view. 25 On the Options Bar.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view.

The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. In this exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You added tags to pipes. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. In this tutorial. you created a wet fire protection system. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. For additional practice.

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 .

306 .

enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and view references. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. under Floor Plans. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and click Rename.rvt. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. If the view included detail graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. dependent views. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and apply a view template. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. 2 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. 307 .Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Level 1. matchlines.

rvt. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Apply Default View Template. more focused. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Rename. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 9 Click OK. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 6 In the Project Browser.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. as shown. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . click Training Files. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. views and put them on the sheet. 4 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 10 In the drawing area. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and then press Esc. create dependent views for areas B and C. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline.

For Line Pattern. click the current value. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. In the Color dialog. select 11. and click OK. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 19 In the drawing area./ ---). 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and then press Esc. select black. for Target view.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 20 Select the upper view reference and. 13 Press Esc twice. select Double Dash 5/8". 21 Using the same method. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. For Line Weight. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Click OK. on the Options Bar.

28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and zoom to each of the view references. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. as shown. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 25 Using the same method.

You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.Domestic Water. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. enter Plumbing Isometric . select Documentation. and click to select it. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. and select the section box. select Plumbing. Under Graphics. select Plumbing Isometric. For Sub-Discipline. Click OK.29 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . right-click Plumbing Isometric . 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. right-click 3D Plumbing. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply Default View Template. and click Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. for View Name. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Domestic Water. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 Zoom in. The section crop lines no longer display. click Training Files. for View Classification. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water.

10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Dash. select 3. press Tab 3 times. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Click Apply. and then click OK. For Pattern.9 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click to select it. 12 Using the same method.

and click to select it. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 14 Right-click. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

15 Press Esc. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. On the View Control Bar. and click to select it. On the View Control Bar. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. press Tab 3 times. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.Sanitary Waste. click Reveal Hidden Elements. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements.Domestic Water view with detailing. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. In the drawing area. 18 Using methods learned previously. Right-click. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

for Rounding. and click to place the spot slope annotation. select To the nearest 1/8". 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. In the Format dialog. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. and then place the callout view on a sheet. For Slope. 21 Click OK twice. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click on the Format value. as shown. Creating Callout Views | 315 . 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. you use a plan view to create a callout view. When the view is associated with a sheet. 25 Press Esc twice. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. verify that Common is selected.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. indicating that it’s the active view. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).rvt. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). In the left pane of the Open dialog. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. for Scale. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. click Training Files.

Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Line Weight. drag it to the sheet. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. double-click M601 . Click OK. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. using the same method. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select 5. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Creating Callout Views | 317 . under Sheets (all). 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. 13 In the Project Browser.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections.

Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and select the viewport. right-click the callout view. Click OK. For Title on Sheet. For Default View Template. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. enter WSHP PART PLAN. for View Name. and click Apply Default View Template.

Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 . The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.

The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK. enter Typical WSHP Detail.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 In the Project Browser. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and click OK.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click Apply View Template. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the detail view. under Names. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 In the Rename View dialog.

symbols.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. linetypes. 321 . and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. duct tags. ■ work with model-based components. and annotation to create a legend. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. you learn how to: ■ add text notes.

8 With the text still selected. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. as shown. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Training Files. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.rvt. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.

Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.9 Press Esc twice. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. select a supply diffuser. a return diffuser. and a segment of rectangular duct. 16 In the drawing area. a segment of round duct. verify that Leader is cleared. as shown. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. and then click Right Straight. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Creating Annotations | 323 . 15 On the Options Bar.

Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. click Load.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. and click Open. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 17 Click Modify. for Ducts. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click OK. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 24 On the Options Bar. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 21 In the Load Family dialog. under Category. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. clear Leader. If necessary. 22 In the Tags dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. as shown. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc.25 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 26 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Leader. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Creating Annotations | 325 . and Attached End. select Horizontal. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 32 In the drawing area.

click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.33 On the Options Bar. for Leader. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Free End. 34 In the drawing area. as shown.

for Leader Arrowhead. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Dimensions | 327 . you use temporary dimensions to locate. and lock lighting fixtures. That’s because you changed a type property. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. lay out. not simply an instance property. and all elements of that type are affected. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style.36 Press Esc twice. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. select Dot Open 1/16". select the last tag placed. and click OK. 37 In the drawing area. 40 Using the method learned previously. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.

Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. indicating that it’s the active view. select the dimension line. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.rvt. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 12 Press Esc. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. and then select the interior face of the wall. On the Options Bar.

15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 16 Press Esc. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and notes. annotation symbols. enter 8'. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 19 Using the same methods. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Because the dimensions are locked. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Enter. and offset them 8' from the wall. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. Creating a Legend | 329 .3 1/2"). Creating a Legend In this exercise. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. linework.13 Using the same method.

Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. click Training Files. 5 Click in the drawing area. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.rvt. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . ■ 9 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select Floor Plan. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. Click OK. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. For Scale. 10 Using the same method.8 Neck.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . For View.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Diffuser Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select 1/4" = 1' -0". click below the title to place the diffuser.

annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area.11 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 331 . Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.

select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 27 While pressing Ctrl. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 24 Select the component’s break line. 26 Press Esc.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.RISE symbol for the copy start point.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point.DROP and its text note. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 21 Press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin. 22 Zoom in to the copied component.

38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then click Modify. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. Creating a Legend | 333 . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.30 Select Spot Elevation . 35 Change the text on the right to N. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. enter E. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.MECHANICAL LEGEND. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 34 Using the method learned previously. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

A detail callout that references another view. detail groups. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. 335 . and text. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. click Training Files. A drafting view using detail components. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.rvt. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .Detailing 15 In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.113 East elevation view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.

and click to place it. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. place Power Riser .113 East on the sheet. Next. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 5 In the drawing area. select each of the 2 panelboards. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. and then modify and align the views. 4 On the Options Bar. 7 Drag the Power Riser .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 8 Using the same method. clear Leader. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. giving the appearance of a single view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. for Title on Sheet. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Activate View. and click Deactivate View. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet.9 Press Esc. right-click. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click OK. 13 Right-click. under Identity Data. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the 113 North view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

you add wiring to the diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. right-click. and click Activate View. select the 113 East elevation view. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. In the next exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. as shown. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 22 Press Esc. 21 Using the drag control. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. click New. In the New Subcategory dialog.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 8 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i.113 North view. select 6. 2 Close the Project Browser. verify that Chain is selected. as shown. for Name. In the Line Styles dialog. enter Electrical Power. As you draw. expand Lines. notice that there are no snaps active. click Training Files.rvt. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and click OK. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Under Modify Subcategories. and then click OK. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. for Line Weight. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset.10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 1/8".

19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. so that the result is as shown. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. TIP When you use the Trim tool.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 28 Click above the cap. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 29 Click Modify. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.

344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 33 On the Options Bar.31 While pressing Ctrl. select Multiple.

5. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. for Offset. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 40 Press Esc.36 Press Esc. enter 3/32". 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 0 0. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and press Enter. and then press Esc. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. You enter exact values for each line length.

You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. and press Enter. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 50 With the group selected. and then press Esc. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 46 In the Project Browser. 47 In the drawing area. while pressing Ctrl.25. you can ensure that they stay together. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .125. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. for Name. enter Ground. expand Groups ➤ Detail. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. Using the same method. select all 3 lines. enter 0 0. and click OK. Press Esc.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. click on the length dimension value.

TP-2B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 54 Select the group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 52 Select the detail group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.51 Using the method learned previously. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Rename. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. In later exercises. click Training Files. 2 Right-click the copy. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. for Name. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click OK. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and will place it on sheet E01. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 5 Zoom in to view the section.

7 On the ViewCube. and then press Esc. Back.6 Select the section box. and then click the corner where the Top. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and Left sides converge. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . click Home.

Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Walkthroughs. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. right-click. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. select 3D HVAC Iso. and click Apply View Template. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Under Names. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. select 3D Views.

19 Complete the text labels. (Right). 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Typical. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Move the cursor down and to the left. 15 Using the same method. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. and click to specify the second leader point. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader.

and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. as shown. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 25 Click OK.To rotate and reposition a text label. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. and under Extents. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. under Extents. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Crop Region Visible. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and then click OK. 23 Click on the crop region.

Place a detail component. 3 In the Project Browser. Click OK. select the isometric view. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Use detail lines to create a detail group. click Training Files. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select 3" = 1'-0". Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Scale. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.29 In the drawing area. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.rvt. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. and click Properties. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. right-click the view name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view.

12 On the Element panel. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 9 Zoom in to the component. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". select Plumbing. select Documentation. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click the point at the top of the drain. for Sub-Discipline. as the rectangle start point. Click OK. For View Classification. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. 13 In the drawing area.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.

5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select 1. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.P. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 18 With the filled region still selected. and then press Esc. select C. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 21 In the drawing area. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.I. Concrete. select the filled region. (Line). 22 Click Modify.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. and click OK. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. for Type. 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.

select Multiple. and then click to select them. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. and then click point 6 as the endpoint.28 Click Modify. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 34 Press Esc. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 45 Using the method learned previously. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. (Rectangle). 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 40 Click Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then press Esc.

D. draw wide detail lines as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog. select the Flashing Membrane group. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. enter Flashing Membrane_F. as shown. and then click to select them. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. for Name. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 49 Click Modify. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.. and click OK. press Tab to highlight the chain. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.

59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 61 Using the same method. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.55 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .

71 Click Modify. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 64 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. and then click OK. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 72 If necessary. as shown. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 67 On the Options Bar. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.62 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.

and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 76 To select the leader start point.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the second leader point. and click to specify the text insertion point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 80 Press Esc twice. 81 Select the text note. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown.

open P103 . Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 90 Press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 88 In the drawing area. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and then press Esc twice. select the view title. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and click to place it.

you import a CAD detail drawing. For A-----NPP. For Layers. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view.rvt. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. select 3. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Auto-Detect. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Black and White. Click Open. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view.dwg. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. select Visible. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Line Weight. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. click Training Files.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. For Colors. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. For Import units. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. open P103 . Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 11 Press Esc. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. select the viewport title.8 Type ZF.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful